ROI-S06497-052E080318

P ASOLINK

N ETWORK

MANAGEMENT

T ERMINAL

PNMT (Java version)Operation Manual(for PASOLINK NEO NODAL)NEC CorporationCopyright copy 2008ROI-S06497- i -

Table of ContentsDOCUMENT WARRANTY11 GETTING STARTED 211 INTRODUCTION 212 CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL213 PNMT COMMUNICATION INTERFACES3131 Communications 3132 LCT Port Interface314 EQUIPMENT CONFIGURATION OF PASOLINK NEO NODAL 415 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS416 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 4

2 SYSTEM OPERATION amp MAINTENANCE 521 THE PNMT SCREEN 522 LAUNCHING THE PNMT APPLICATION 823 LOGIN 9231 User Access Privilege Levels1024 SHUTTING DOWN THE PNMT1225 SEARCHING FOR NETWORK ELEMENTS AND CONNECTING TO SELECTED NE1326 CHANGE PASSWORD1427 ALARM BUZZER SETTING1528 REFRESH 1529 REMOTE VIEWING USING PNMT MAIN WINDOW16210 LICENSE17211 OVERALL STATUS20212 ODUTAB22213 MODEMTAB25214 INTFC INTERFACE TAB29215 AUXILIARY IO TAB 312151 Monitored Items 312152 Photocoupler Input Setting322153 Relay Output Setting 33216 CONTROL (CTRL) TAB 342161 Control Module342162 Setting the DateTime 352163 CPU Reset 352164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control Module 362165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control Module 382166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control Module 392167 Downloading the Software Key Files412168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PC422169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PC4321610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PC4321611 Configuring the Equipment Network Settings44217 MAINTENANCE452171 Selecting Maintenance482172 Mode482173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)492174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH]) 492175 ATPC Manual Control 49ROI-S06497- ii -2176 TX Mute Control 502177 CW Control502178 IF Loopback 502179 DADE Adjust 5121710 Linearizer Control5121711 RF Setting 5121712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type) 5221713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)5221714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)5221715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48) 5321716 Main Loopback-15321717 ALS Restart54218 EQUIPMENT SETUP55

2181 Equipment Setup window552182 Editing the IDU Name 562183 Editing the Note for CTRL 562184 Setup562185 Frequency Channel61219 PROVISIONING622191 Channel Setting652192 XC Setting6621921 XC Setting CH Map 672193 BER Threshold Setting682194 SC Assignment 692195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) 702196 TX Power CTRL702197 SW Condition 702198 Relay Configuration712199 Cluster Alarm Input 7121910 EOW2 External Setting 7121911 PMON Select 7221912 Alarm Correlation Capability7221913 STM-1 Usage Error Reported 72220 LINK PERFORMANCE MONITOR732201 Viewing Link Performance Monitor732202 Threshold Setting 752203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window76221 EVENT LOG772211 Event Log monitor 77222 INVENTORY TAB 782221 Inventory Monitor 78APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TERMINAL)79APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (2-WAY) 88APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TRIBUTARY ONLY) 98APPENDIX D HOW TO AVOID LOSING SETTING VALUES DURING DOWNLOADING 115ROI-S06497- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screen figures in this manual are only examples Screens will varyaccording to equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to theequipment manual for detailsROI-S06497- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal systemdeveloped by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical user

interface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons on the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then itemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must enter theappropriate valueThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06497- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment can be via theLCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1

bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06497- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO NODALPASOLINK NEO has 6types of IDUbull 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)bull 1+1 (TWINPATH)bull 1+0-gt1+1bull 2-WAYbull 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)bull 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)15 Hardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz or equivalentbull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T(X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker16 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull ADOBEreg READERreg

bull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06497- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate the title of the windowbull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its main

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2 SYSTEM OPERATION amp MAINTENANCE 521 THE PNMT SCREEN 522 LAUNCHING THE PNMT APPLICATION 823 LOGIN 9231 User Access Privilege Levels1024 SHUTTING DOWN THE PNMT1225 SEARCHING FOR NETWORK ELEMENTS AND CONNECTING TO SELECTED NE1326 CHANGE PASSWORD1427 ALARM BUZZER SETTING1528 REFRESH 1529 REMOTE VIEWING USING PNMT MAIN WINDOW16210 LICENSE17211 OVERALL STATUS20212 ODUTAB22213 MODEMTAB25214 INTFC INTERFACE TAB29215 AUXILIARY IO TAB 312151 Monitored Items 312152 Photocoupler Input Setting322153 Relay Output Setting 33216 CONTROL (CTRL) TAB 342161 Control Module342162 Setting the DateTime 352163 CPU Reset 352164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control Module 362165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control Module 382166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control Module 392167 Downloading the Software Key Files412168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PC422169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PC4321610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PC4321611 Configuring the Equipment Network Settings44217 MAINTENANCE452171 Selecting Maintenance482172 Mode482173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)492174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH]) 492175 ATPC Manual Control 49ROI-S06497- ii -2176 TX Mute Control 502177 CW Control502178 IF Loopback 502179 DADE Adjust 5121710 Linearizer Control5121711 RF Setting 5121712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type) 5221713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)5221714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)5221715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48) 5321716 Main Loopback-15321717 ALS Restart54218 EQUIPMENT SETUP55

2181 Equipment Setup window552182 Editing the IDU Name 562183 Editing the Note for CTRL 562184 Setup562185 Frequency Channel61219 PROVISIONING622191 Channel Setting652192 XC Setting6621921 XC Setting CH Map 672193 BER Threshold Setting682194 SC Assignment 692195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) 702196 TX Power CTRL702197 SW Condition 702198 Relay Configuration712199 Cluster Alarm Input 7121910 EOW2 External Setting 7121911 PMON Select 7221912 Alarm Correlation Capability7221913 STM-1 Usage Error Reported 72220 LINK PERFORMANCE MONITOR732201 Viewing Link Performance Monitor732202 Threshold Setting 752203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window76221 EVENT LOG772211 Event Log monitor 77222 INVENTORY TAB 782221 Inventory Monitor 78APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TERMINAL)79APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (2-WAY) 88APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TRIBUTARY ONLY) 98APPENDIX D HOW TO AVOID LOSING SETTING VALUES DURING DOWNLOADING 115ROI-S06497- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screen figures in this manual are only examples Screens will varyaccording to equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to theequipment manual for detailsROI-S06497- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal systemdeveloped by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical user

interface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons on the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then itemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must enter theappropriate valueThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06497- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment can be via theLCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1

bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06497- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO NODALPASOLINK NEO has 6types of IDUbull 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)bull 1+1 (TWINPATH)bull 1+0-gt1+1bull 2-WAYbull 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)bull 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)15 Hardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz or equivalentbull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T(X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker16 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull ADOBEreg READERreg

bull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06497- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate the title of the windowbull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its main

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2181 Equipment Setup window552182 Editing the IDU Name 562183 Editing the Note for CTRL 562184 Setup562185 Frequency Channel61219 PROVISIONING622191 Channel Setting652192 XC Setting6621921 XC Setting CH Map 672193 BER Threshold Setting682194 SC Assignment 692195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown) 702196 TX Power CTRL702197 SW Condition 702198 Relay Configuration712199 Cluster Alarm Input 7121910 EOW2 External Setting 7121911 PMON Select 7221912 Alarm Correlation Capability7221913 STM-1 Usage Error Reported 72220 LINK PERFORMANCE MONITOR732201 Viewing Link Performance Monitor732202 Threshold Setting 752203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) window76221 EVENT LOG772211 Event Log monitor 77222 INVENTORY TAB 782221 Inventory Monitor 78APPENDIX A EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TERMINAL)79APPENDIX B EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (2-WAY) 88APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT NETWORK SETTINGS (TRIBUTARY ONLY) 98APPENDIX D HOW TO AVOID LOSING SETTING VALUES DURING DOWNLOADING 115ROI-S06497- 1 -Document Warranty1 The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice2 The PNMSPNMT screen figures in this manual are only examples Screens will varyaccording to equipment configurations equipment operation modes setting parametersPNMSPNMT application program version etc Screens contained in this manual arecurrent at the moment of publishing however they may differ slightly from the actualscreens on your PNMSPNMT3 This manual is written on the assumption that you already understand the restrictionslimitations and precautions necessary to operate the equipment properly Refer to theequipment manual for detailsROI-S06497- 2 -1 Getting Started11 IntroductionThe PNMT is a computer-based PASOLINK Network Management Terminal systemdeveloped by NEC for management of NECrsquos PASOLINK wireless transmission networkThe PNMT is a scaled down version of PASOLINK Network Management System (PNMS)that is designed as a maintenance tool for field engineers to locally and remotely monitoralarms control points generate reports and archive data all within a familiar graphical user

interface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons on the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then itemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must enter theappropriate valueThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06497- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment can be via theLCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1

bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06497- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO NODALPASOLINK NEO has 6types of IDUbull 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)bull 1+1 (TWINPATH)bull 1+0-gt1+1bull 2-WAYbull 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)bull 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)15 Hardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz or equivalentbull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T(X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker16 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull ADOBEreg READERreg

bull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06497- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate the title of the windowbull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its main

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

interface and all in real time Throughout this manual ldquothe PNMTrdquo generally refers to themobile laptop computer in which the NEC PNMT software package (that interfaces andcontrols NEC PASOLINK series short haul wireless equipment) is installed inThis software package remotely monitors and controls the status and configuration of anentire PASOLINK network with associated equipment as well as the performance of theactual microwave links12 Conventions Used in This ManualFont What the Font Represents ExampleItalic For manual titles or relateddocument namesPlease refer to PASOLINKOperation Manual for detailsHostnameBoldItems on the user interfaceItems on the computer displayFile and directory namesThe Overall window[Button] Buttons on the user interface Click [OK] button to continueClick [Execute] button to sendcommandMenu Items A menu name followed by acolon () means that you mustselect the menu and then itemWhen the item is followed byan arrow (1048774) a cascadingmenu followsSelect System 1048774 LoginLogoutltusernamegtA command variable wherethe user must enter theappropriate valueThis is also commonly usedwhen asking for a passwordltpasswordgtKeycap Keyboard keys Press Enter keyROI-S06497- 3 -13 PNMT Communication Interfaces131 CommunicationsCommunications between the PNMT and the wireless network equipment can be via theLCT port of the equipment132 LCT Port InterfaceThe LCT port is located on the front of the equipmentPNMT ndash IDU ConnectionThe PNMT and the Control (CTRL) Module mounted in the IDU must be connected using astandard USB cable (the Type A plug is fitted into the Type A socket of the PNMT computerand the Type B plug is fitted into the Type B socket of the LCT Port on the IDU Control[CTRL] Module)The LCT port has the following specificationsbull Connector type USB Type B (female)bull Bit per second rate 120024004800960019200 (default 19200)bull Stop bits 1

bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06497- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO NODALPASOLINK NEO has 6types of IDUbull 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)bull 1+1 (TWINPATH)bull 1+0-gt1+1bull 2-WAYbull 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)bull 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)15 Hardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz or equivalentbull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T(X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker16 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull ADOBEreg READERreg

bull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06497- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate the title of the windowbull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its main

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

bull Data bit length 8bull Parity no parityROI-S06497- 4 -14 Equipment Configuration of PASOLINK NEO NODALPASOLINK NEO has 6types of IDUbull 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)bull 1+1 (TWINPATH)bull 1+0-gt1+1bull 2-WAYbull 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)bull 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)15 Hardware RequirementsRecommended configuration of PNMT mobile computerbull CPU Pentium M 160GHz or equivalentbull RAM 512MB or morebull HD 40GB or morebull Display color LCD (1024 768) or morebull FD drivebull CD-ROM drivebull USB portbull Serial port (RS-232C)bull 10100BASE-T(X) LAN portbull USB cable with USB-B connecterbull Internal sound system with speaker16 Software Requirementsbull OS Windows2000 Professional (English version) with SP4 or higherWindows XP Professional (English version) with SP2 or higherbull IE60 with SP2 or higherbull Java Runtime Environment v 142_11 or higher(JRE v 15 is not currently supported)bull ADOBEreg READERreg

bull PNMT Application softwareROI-S06497- 5 -2 System Operation amp MaintenanceThis chapter explains the menu structure and procedures for operating the PNMT Theexplanation uses typical PNMT screens to illustrate the hierarchy of menu21 The PNMT ScreenThe PNMT window comprises the following main parts (Refer to Figure 1)bull Title BarThe title bar of the window is used to indicate the title of the windowbull Common Menu BarThe common menu bar of the window presents the System and Help options illustrates thecommands that can be executed from the various options The Help function also candisplay operation manualbull NE-specific Menu BarThis menu is a list of tasks that can be performed to the specific network element (NE)displayed in the PNMT Configuration Event Log and Link Performance Monitor functionscan be executed in the NE-specific menu barbull Block DiagramThe block diagram illustrates the equipmentpart of the PASOLINK wireless system Its main

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

purpose in the window is to display the current summary alarm state of the equipment Youcan click a specific block to display the status of equipment in the data windowbull IP address Window (for 2-WAY system only)The IP addresses for the respective opposite stations connected to DIR-ADIR-B aredisplayed in the IP address window Each selected station has a button which whenclicked enables the display mode for the respective connected device(s) to be switched fromDIR-A to DIR-B (or vice versa)The available display options areOpposite station is displayed blue backgroundOpposite station is not displayed or no opposite station is connected (IP address is displayedas rdquo000000000000rdquo) white backgroundbull Overall Status WindowThe Overall Status Window shows a snapshot of all important parameterssettings for theNE This window only displays current settings control functions cannot be performed herebull Data WindowThis window displays in detail the status and alarm items of specific equipmentparts of theNE You can select the tab or the block of the specific equipmentpart which you want tomonitor in the data windowbull TabsTo view the status and alarms in the specific part of the NE click on the tab at the bottom ofthe Data Windowbull IDU TabsTabs are displayed for the number of IDUs configured for the StationROI-S06497- 6 -bull Command ButtonThe command button is used to enter the data selected in the pop-up window into thecomputerbull Text BoxThis is a standard Windows dialog box where the user inputs the desired valuebull Login UserDenotes the user currently logged-in to the PNMTbull Background color attribute for each alarm and statusThe respective Background color for each alarm and status is as followsnormal Green major alarm Red minor alarm Pinkstatus value White disabled Gray maintenance YellowROI-S06497- 7 -Figure 1 Standard components of PNMT WindowCommonTool BarNE-Specific Menu Bar Block DiagramOverallStatusWindowLogin UserCommonMenu BarText BoxCommand ButtonRadio ButtonTabsTitle Bar

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

IDU TabsIP addressWindowROI-S06497- 8 -22 Launching the PNMT ApplicationTo start PNMT1 Turn ON the computerNOTEConnect the PNMT cable 30 seconds after IDUs poweris ON making sure that the PNMT cable is connectedbetween USB port of the PNMT computer and the LCTport of the IDU2 Login to Windows OS3 Click Start 1048774 Programs 1048774 PNMTj 1048774 Pnmt then continue to the login windowNOTEPlease do not change the clock settings of yourcomputer once PNMT has startedROI-S06497- 9 -23 LoginUsers are registered by means of login name and passwordTo protect the network and network management system from unauthorized access orunauthorized modifications five levels (refer to the table shown in section 231 User AccessLevel Privilege) of users are defined with different privileges The functions available in thewindow depend on the userrsquos access level Therefore some of the functions may or may notbe carried outThe highest or administrator level (Admin) has full access to the network and networkmanagement systemTo login1 Start PNMT and then Login windowappears2 Enter the ltuser namegt3 Enter the valid ltpasswordgt for therespective user4 For Connection select Dialup5 For Dialup Entry Name selectPNMT(USB)6 Click the [Login] button If you wish toexit the program click [Exit] buttonPNMT main windowROI-S06497- 10 -231 User Access Privilege Levels1048774 Available - Not availableFunctions User Name and Accessible FunctionsCategory ITEM Monitor User Local Remote AdminSYSTEM ALARM BUZZER - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONNECT (Remote Login) - - - 1048774 1048774NE LIST CONNECT - - - 1048774 1048774NE STORD LOG SAVE AS - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774(Wizard Setting) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IDU NAME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EQUIPMENTSETUPNOTE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CH USAGE ERROR REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

AIS ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS GENERATED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED REPORT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774AIS RECEIVED CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E1 PORT IMPEDANCE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774STM-1 USAGE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CHANNEL SETTINGSTM-1 USAGE ERROR REPORTED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DXC SETTING DXC CH SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774HIGH BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LOW BER THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774E-BER (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774BER THRESHOLDSETTINGSD (MUX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RS-232C-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774V11-1 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SC ASSIGNMENTV11-2 DIRECTION SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS ALS FUNCTION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS INTERVAL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MTPC TX POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC THRESHOLD LEVEL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ADDITIONAL ATT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MAX) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC RANGE (MIN) - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX POWER CTRLATPC POWER MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW PRIORITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MAINTENANCE MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONDITIONfor TXRX SWRX SW CONDITION-EARLY WARNING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAY CONFIGRATION CHANGED - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER1 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER2 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CLUSTER3 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RELAYCLUSTER4 INPUT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TCN THRESHOLD TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774EOW IF TYPE EOW2 EXTERNAL SETTING - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON SELECT RX LEV TCN THRESHOLD - - 1048774 1048774 1048774SES ACTIVATION CONDITION - - 1048774 1048774 1048774PROVISIONINGALARM CORRELATION ALARM CORRELATION CAPABILITY - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCE - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774TX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RX SW MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ATPC MANUAL POWER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774TX MUTE OFF TIMER - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CW CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774IF LOOPBACK - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN CH LOOPBACH-2 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAIN LOOPBACK-1 - - 1048774 1048774 1048774DADE ADJUST - - 1048774 1048774 1048774LINEARIZER CONTROL - - 1048774 1048774 1048774ALS RESTART - - 1048774 1048774 1048774RF SUB BAND SELECT - - 1048774 1048774 1048774MAINTENANCEANTENNA ALIGNMENT MODE - - 1048774 1048774 1048774

ROI-S06497- 11 -AUX IO INPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774OUTPUT - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774PMON PMON All Data Clear - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774EVENT LOG Save to disk - 1048774 1048774 1048774 1048774CONTROL DATETIME - - 1048774 1048774 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774PROGRAM FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

DOWNLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774UPDATE SOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774CONFIGURATION FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT CONFIG FILE - - - - 1048774UPLOADSOFTKEY FILE - - - - 1048774EQUIPMENT NETWORKSETTING NETWORK SETTING - - - - 1048774CTRLCPU RESET RESET - - 1048774 1048774 1048774Admin Enabled to access all Network ElementsRemote Enabled to access all Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)Local Enabled to access directly connected Network Elements(Disabled from changing network configuration and changingdownloading programs)User Enabled only to access items which do not affect the equipmentMonitor Enabled only to monitor (disabled from control)ROI-S06497- 12 -24 Shutting Down the PNMTTo close the PNMT application1 Click System 1048774 Exit in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Click [OK] button in the confirmation message window to close the applicationROI-S06497- 13 -25 Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NEThe summary description (IDU Name Equipment Type Opposite NE etc) of the current NEwhere PNMT is connected can be displayed using this function Summary description of theopposite NE belonging to that link is also displayedTo search for or connect to NE in the network1 Click System 1048774 Connect in menu bar on PNMT main windowNOTEInitially only the current NE physically connected to thePNMT and its opposite NE will be shown in the NetworkElement List2 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Search for Network Element in the menubar on the Network Element List window to display all connectable Network Elementsin the network3 Select and highlight the Network Element to be viewed4 Click on icon in the tool bar or List 1048774 Connect to Network Element in the menubar of the Network Element List window PNMT main window for both the selectedand its opposite Network Element will be displayedNOTESimultaneous connection from multiple PNMT to thesame NE is possible1 Local connectionPNMT is directly connected to the NE2 Opposite connectionPNMT is connected toopposite NE (of the local)3 Remote connectionPNMT is connected to the NE by remote accessROI-S06497- 14 -26 Change PasswordTo change the password1 Click System 1048774 Change Password in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Enter the old ltpasswordgt

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

3 Enter new ltpasswordgt4 Reenter the new ltpasswordgt in the Confirm New Password box to confirm5 Click [OK] buttonNOTEFor details on initial user name and password pleaserefer to PNMT Installation ManualROI-S06497- 15 -27 Alarm Buzzer SettingThis function is used to activate and set the Alarm Buzzer The desired sound scheme canalso be set using this functionTo set the Alarm Buzzer1 Click System 1048774 Alarm Buzzer in the menu bar of PNMT main window2 Select the Wave file to activate the buzzer No sound is the factory setting of thePNMT3 If you select the Wave file box enter the location of the sound file (wav) Otherwiseclick the browse button to locate the desired file You can also preview the wavfile by clicking on the arrow button next to the browse button4 Click the [OK] button to activate the new setting28 RefreshThis function is supported only by PNMT This function enables PNMT to manually obtainmetering and alarm status as well as to update equipment informationTo RefreshClick Refresh 1048774 Refresh in the menu bar or click on the refresh icon in the tool barROI-S06497- 16 -29 Remote Viewing using PNMT main windowYou can view a target link underlying the one Root NE in the managed network by searchingthe connectable NEs and then connecting to a target NE Please refer to Section 25Searching for Network Elements and Connecting to Selected NE This function allowsremote connection to any NE in the networkPNMT main window (1+1(HOT STANDBY) configuration)ROI-S06497- 17 -210 LicenseTo protect PNMT functions the PNMT application includes license filesTo display the current license status1 Click Help 1048774 License in the main window2 Click [Close] to shut this window To obtain the license file click [Import] and followthe following procedure3 Click [Next] to continueROI-S06497- 18 -4 Specify the LicenseKey file if one is available Click [Next]5 The progress of Check License File will be displayed If no error is encountered whenimporting license file click [Next] as soon as the button becomes availableROI-S06497- 19 -6 Confirm the type of license Imported and click [Next]7 Click [Finish] in ensuing window to end Import License WizardROI-S06497- 20 -211 Overall Status

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

The Overall Status provides a snapshot of the most significant monitored items in the IDUThe Overall Status shows a snapshot of all important NE parameterssettings This windowonly displays current settings no control functions are available hereThese are the individual items that are shownItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RF Frequency The currently used transmission frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRX RF Frequency The currently used receiving frequency When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control Shows the power control mode currently used bythe ODU The TX Power Control is eitherAutomatic Transmitter Power Control (ATPC) orManual Transmitter Power Control (MTPC)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is2-WAYMTPC TX Power The value (in dB) of the Manual TransmitterPower Control attenuation currently set in theODU The MTPC Attenuation will only have validdata if the MTPC is enabledWhen TX POWER CONTROL =MTPC and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYOverall StatusROI-S06497- 21 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID The predefined value of the NE frame ID When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYINTFC The currently used INTFC (interface card) None (displayed by default)TransmissionCapacity (DIRADIR-B)The transmission capacity of the system When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYModulation scheme(DIR-ADIR-B)The currently used modulation type When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYALS Function Intermittently turns laser output onoff afterdesignated interval from start of LOS mode beingEnabled or Disabled (Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedTX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for transmitting signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW status Shows which modem-ODU configuration iscurrently used for receiving signalsWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)IDU ID Individual ID allotted to each IDU None (Displayed by default)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 22 -212 ODU TabThe ODU tab displays the status of the monitored ODU items This window only displayscurrent settings and no control functions are available hereNote ODU tab is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) settings are configuredTo set the ODU parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarm status display of the ODU1 Click the respective ODU field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the Items monitored in the ODUItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX Power Indicates the status of the transmitter inthe ODUit is issued when the transmission leveldecreases 3 dB or more from the preset

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

minimum ATPC levelWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTX Input Indicates the status of the ODU inputsignal from the IDU it is issued whenthe input signal from the IDU is lostWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledROI-S06497- 23 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRX Level Indicates the status of the received RFsignal level of the ODU it is issuedwhen the RF signal drops below the RXthresholdWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledAPC Indicates the status of the synthesizerin the ODU it is issued when ananomaly occurs in the synthesizerWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledODU CPUCableOpenIndicates the status of the CPU in theODU it is issued when an anomalyoccurs during CPU operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring MODEM POWER SUPPLY IF CABLESHORT UNEQUIPPED INPUT VOLTAGEalarms Display is disabledMute Status On transmitter output is muted (off)Off transmitter output is normal (on)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDuring ODU CPU alarm or MODEM POWERSUPPLY IF CABLE SHORT UNEQUIPPEDINPUT VOLTAGE alarms Display is disabledTCN-RX LEV-15min The (lower) Threshold Crossing Noticelevel for 15 min alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 24 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTCN-RX LEV-1day The (lower) Threshold CrossingNotice level for 1 day alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used fortransmitting signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)RX SW Status Indicates the modem-ODUconfiguration currently used forreceiving signalsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or1+1 (TWINPATH)1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 25 -213 MODEM TabThe MODEM tab displays the status of the monitored items of the modem This window onlydisplays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the modem parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup and ProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the modemSelect MODEM field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the alarm and status itemsfeatures of the modemItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMODEM Module Indicates the status of the modulatordemodulatorThis alarm is issued when an anomalyoccurs in the modulator-demodulatorWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMODEMUnequippedIndicates whether a MODEM is properlymounted If the MODEM contact isunplugged or if none is mounted (inaccordance with the EquipmentSetup) this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLOF Indicates the frame synchronizationstatusWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 26 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrame ID Indicates that the frame ID numbers ofan NE and its opposite are out of syncWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYHigh BER Indicates severe quality deteriorationstatus If the signal deteriorates belowthe preset threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch isoperated The selectable thresholdlevels are 1E-3 1E-4 and 1E-5When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLow BER Indicates low to moderate qualitydeterioration statusbetween radio sections When thesignal deteriorates below the presentthreshold value this alarm is issuedand the RX-Hitless Switch is activatedThe selectable threshold values are1E-6 1E-7 1E-8 and 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYEarly Warning Indicates quality deterioration status Ifthe signal deteriorates beyond thepresent threshold level this alarm isissued and the RX-Hitless Switch is

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

activated The present threshold is aBER of 1E-9When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYMOD Indicates the operating status of theMOD If any anomaly occurs in themodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYDEM Indicates the operating status of theDEM If any anomaly occurs in thedemodulator this alarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 27 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredInput Voltage Indicates the operating status of theinput power voltage When there is ananomaly in the input voltage this alarmis issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYPower Supply Indicates the operating status of thepower supply When there is ananomaly in the power supply this alarmis issuedNone (displayed by default)

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYIF Cable Short Indicates the status of IF cable betweenIDU and ODU If a short circuit iscaused between ODU and the IDU thisalarm is issuedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYCable EQL Indicates the status of the IF cableequalizer This alarm is issued whenthe equalizer function does not kick inWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYLinearizer Function Indicates the status of linearizerfunctionOPR When the linearizer functionis usedNO OPR When the linearizer functionis not usedIn this case TX output powerdecreases approx 4 dBmfrom a standard valueNA When the ODU is usedwithout linearizer functionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeLinearizer Indicates the linearizer operating statusthis alarm is issued when the linearizeris not properly operating in the OPRstateWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot available in QPSK Modulation SchemeROI-S06497- 28 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredATPC Power Mode Indicates the operating status of theATPC If the ATPC is not properlyfunctioning stop the control andmaintain the TX output level at HOLDMIN (selectable)TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 29 -214 INTFC INTERFACE TabThe INTFC tab displays the status of the monitored items for the INTFC interface Thiswindow only displays current settings and no control functions are available hereTo set the INTFC interface parameters see the chapters on Equipment Setup andProvisioningTo view the alarms and status of the INTFC interfaceSelect INTFC field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUOverview and description of the monitored items for INTFC interfaceItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredINTFC Module Indicates the operating status of INTFC If anyanomaly occurs in INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)INTFCType MismatchWhen this alarm is issued it indicates that INTFCdoes not correspond to the inventory listNone (displayed by default)INTFC Unequipped Indicates whether there is any INTFC If there isno INTFC this alarm is issuedNone (displayed by default)Input LOS CH (1 ndash16)Indicates the input status of the input E1 signalfrom MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS received CH(1 - 16)

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Indicates the E1 signal transmitting status If AISis received from MUX this alarm is issuedOnly with the setting AIS RECEIVEDREPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedAIS generated CH(1 - 16)Indicates the E1 signal receiving status Only with the setting AISGENERATED REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedUsage Error CH(1 - 16)Indicates the status of the E1 signal interfaceWhen E1 signal is applied to the input interface aslong as it is set to Not Used this alarm isgenerated This parameter is indicated only whenCH Usage Error Report has been selectedOnly with the setting CH USAGEERROR REPORT = REPORTOnly CH with the setting CHUSAGE = USED are displayedINTFC Inphase Indicates the DADE status of the received No1and No2 signal If the received signal delay timeis out of the permissible range an Out-of-phasealarm is issuedWhen REDUNDANCY SETTING =1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1(TWINPATH)ROI-S06497- 30 -ItemFeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredUAE (TotalDIR-A)(TotalDIR-B)Indicates whether any UAS were monitored (inany channel)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSTM-1 LOS (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input is disconnected this alarmis issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 LOF (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the input signal is out of framesynchronization this alarm is issuedWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 E-BER(MUX)Indicates Excessive-BER of the input STM-1

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

signal from MUX If the signal deteriorates belowthe present threshold level this alarm is issuedThe settable threshold values are 1E-3 1E-4 and1E-5When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 SD (MUX) Indicates the input signal status of the STM-1from MUX If the signal deteriorates below thepreset threshold level the alarm is issued Theselectable threshold values are 1E-6 IE-7 1E-8and 1E-9When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 TF Indicates alarm when there is a defect in thisinterface that interrupts the STM-1 signalWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSTM-1 UAE (MUX) Indicates whether UAS were monitored (in MUX) When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedID ERROR Displayed if NE ID is incorrect None (displayed by default)EXT CABLE( = 123)Displayed if intra-NE cable is incorrect When IDU number for EXT1 CABLE= 23 4When IDU number for EXT2 CABLE= 34When IDU number for EXT3 CABLE= 4STM-1 USAGEERRORDisplayed when an input signal is detected atunused STM-1 port F(Only DXC INTFC)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)ROI-S06497- 31 -215 Auxiliary IO Tab6 photocoupler input and 4-relay output settings can be selected in the IDU for externalcontrol and monitoring of alarms The setting for each of the relay outputphotocoupler inputsis available by clicking on the respective device in the Auxiliary IO monitor windowTo monitor and set the Auxiliary IO1 Select AUX IO field in PNMT main windowAUX IO tab2151 Monitored ItemsThe following items are monitored via this tab1 Six (6) photocoupler inputs (Input-1 to Input-6)2 Four (4)-relay outputs (Output-1 to Output-4)When Cluster ALM Setting (Input) is enabled the following Input items can be used asCluster ALMFor 2-WAYconfiguration

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM1 (DIR-B)2 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM2 (DIR-B)3 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM3 (DIR-A)4 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4 (DIR-A)For standard (non-2-WAY) configuration1 When Cluster1 Input is enabled Input-6 item is used as Cluster ALM12 When Cluster2 Input is enabled Input-5 item is used as Cluster ALM23 When Cluster3 Input is enabled Input-4 item is used as Cluster ALM34 When Cluster4 Input is enabled Input-3 item is used as Cluster ALM4ROI-S06497- 32 -2152 Photocoupler Input SettingTo set the photocoupler input1 Click the selected [AuxIn-n] button in AUX IO tab2 The input properties will be displayed in the ensuing windowSetting the Selected Input to Alarm or Status1 Enter the desired name of the selected input in the Name field A maximum of 32characters can be used2 Select the desired input condition in the Condition section You can select from thefollowing three (3) choices such as ldquothe alarm is reported when Event ON (theselected input terminal is closed loop condition)rdquo or ldquothe alarm is reported whenEvent OFF (the selected input terminal is open condition)rdquo or ldquothe just Statusinformation is reported instead of the alarmrdquo3 Enter the status strings corresponding to the input condition in the Event ON andEvent OFF field in the Status Strings section A maximum of 32 characters can beused4 The alarm input severity is defined in the ITU-T X733 Recommendation Select thedescription of the Severity Alarm Type and Probable Cause fields in the X733section by clicking the pull-down arrow ( ) on the right-hand side of the selectionfield5 Click [Execute] button to save the selected settings of the device6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 33 -2153 Relay Output SettingTo set the relay output1 Click [AuxOut-n] button in AUX IO tab2 Enter the desired name of the selected output inthe Name field A maximum of 32 characterscan be used3 To select the desired output condition of theselected relay output select the Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)or Event OFF button (the output terminal will beopen) in the Control section4 Enter the desired status strings for the selectedrelay output in the appropriate Event ON (theoutput terminal will be in closed loop condition)and Event OFF fields (the output terminal will be open) with the Control section Amaximum of 32 characters can be used5 Click [Execute] button to implement the command6 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

- 34 -216 Control (CTRL) TabSelect CTRL field in PNMT main window of the selected IDUVarious control parameters can be set via the CTRL tab2161 Control ModuleThe following items can be monitored and controlled in the CTRLbull CTRLbull Memorybull DateTimebull CPU Resetbull Download Configuration Filebull Download Program Filebull Download Equipment Configuration Filebull Download Software Key Filebull Upload Configuration Filebull Upload Equipment Configuration Filebull Upload Software Key Filebull Equipment Network SettingROI-S06497- 35 -2162 Setting the DateTimeThe Date and Time stored in Control module can be displayed and adjusted using thisfunctionTo set the DateTime1 Click the [DateTime] button in CTRL tab2 To check the Date and Time Settings of the Control module1) Select Get DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) The current date and time in the Control module will be displayed in the Dateand Time field3 To set the Date and Time on the Control module1) Select Set DateTime in the DateTime window2) Click [Execute] button3) Click [Close] button when done2163 CPU ResetThe Control module can be reset using this functionThe CPU Reset window is not available when Maintenance is OffNOTEResetting the Control module will not affect traffic Theconnection to the selected NE will be lost for a few minutesbut will be automatically restoredNOTETo synchronize the Date andTime field values with those ofthe PNMT computer click theDisplay PC Time box (placing acheckmark in it)ROI-S06497- 36 -To reset the Control module1 Click the [CPU Reset] button in CTRL tab2 With the Module Select feature select CTRL orODU

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

3 When ODU is selected you can select the ldquowithROM (Program) Switchingrdquo option if you want toswitch to a newly downloaded Control moduleProgram fileODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settings areconfigured4 Click [Execute] button to continue the Controlmodule reset operation5 Click the [Close] button when done2164 Downloading the Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download the network configuration files from the PNMT to theControl module The network configuration file ndash pp_networkcfg contains the IP address ofthe target NE as well as the IP address of the opposite NE and the information about thenetwork where the target NE is located The pp_mibcfg file contains relevant informationabout the equipment (ie name pm type etc) and housekeeping (AUX IO)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the new configuration file to the CTRL1 Click [DL Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be downloaded in the Type list3 Enter the location of the configuration file in the File field or click [Browse] to locatethe file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNINGMake sure that the correct configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Anincorrect configuration file may lead to Control moduleor network malfunctionfailureROI-S06497- 37 -4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedWARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloadedthe configuration file before executing UpdateOtherwise the Control module will switch to an emptyROM that may cause Control modulemalfunctionfailure6 Click the [Update] button to activate and save the new configuration file(s)7 Select the appropriate box for the type of configuration file to be updated One ormore configuration file(s) can be updated by checking the selection box of theconfiguration file name Click [Execute] to start the operation The with ROM(CTRL Program) Switching box is for switching to the ROM with the new CTRLProgram and has the same function that was previously described in section 2165Downloading a new Program file to the Control ModuleNOTEWhen updating the pp_networkcfg file NE-to-NEcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMT

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

connection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module is reset8 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 38 -2165 Downloading a new Program File to the Control ModuleThis function is used to update the application program on the Control module Thisoperation only affects the NMS communication but not the wireless link and will not disruptcommunicationThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the program file to Control module1 Click the [DL Program File] button in CTRLtabODU is not displayed if 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) settingsare configured2 Enter the appropriate location of the programfile (out) in the File field Otherwise click[Browse] to locate the fileWARNINGMake sure that the correct program file isdownloaded to the Control moduleIncorrect program files are likely to causemalfunction3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operationWARNINGWhile data is being transmitted do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PC4 A message window will appear displaying the status of the operation The messagewindow will close automatically once the download is completedNOTEThis operation may take several minutes depending onthe program file size5 Click the [CPU Reset] button to switch to the newprogram file6 Check the ldquowith ROM (Program) Switchingrdquo box7 Click the [Execute] button to complete the switch to thenew program fileNOTEThe connection to the selected NE will be lost for afew minutes but will be automatically restoredshortlyROI-S06497- 39 -2166 Downloading the Equipment Configuration Files to the Control ModuleThis function is used to download equipment configuration files from the PNMT to the Controlmodule The equipment configuration file contains the wireless configuration data (iefrequency main interface) and provisioning data (ie BER alarm threshold)This window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download new configuration file to the NE1 Click the [DL Equipment Config File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteWARNING

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

The OFFLINETOOL creates the Equipment Config File foreach IDUBefore downloading the Equipment Config File which hasbeen created in OFFLINETOOL through PNMT make surethat SUB TYPE=OFFLINE is specified in HeaderInformation on Downloading the Equipment ConfigurationFile menu In addition be sure to specify the destinationIDU correctlyWARNINGMake sure that the correct equipment configuration file isdownloaded to the correct Control module Incorrectconfiguration file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is finishedROI-S06497- 40 -WARNINGMake sure that you have successfully downloaded theconfiguration file before executing Update Otherwise theControl module will switch to an empty ROM that is liableto cause Control module malfunctionfailure5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new equipment configuration file Click the[Execute] button to start the update operationNOTEWhen downloading a Pn_equip_0x (x1-4) file createdwith OfflineTool the TX RF Frequency and TX RFFrequency setting values can be lost during downloadingwith PNMT if they are not within the target ODUrsquos settingrange for the same parametersWhen the following error alert appears please refer toAppendix D6 Click the [Close] button when doneROI-S06497- 41 -2167 Downloading the Software Key FilesThis function is used to download the Software Key file from the PNMT to the Control moduleThe Software Key file is used to enhance PNMT functionalityThis window is not available when Maintenance is OffTo download the Software Key files1 Click the [DL Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Browse] button to locate the file on the local hard disk or disketteROI-S06497- 42 -WARNINGMake sure that the correct Software Key file isdownloaded to the correct Control module IncorrectSoftware Key file is liable to cause Control module ornetwork malfunctionfailure3 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation4 The values of ldquoEquipment Current Statusrdquo are updated5 Click the [Update] button to activate the new Software Key file ldquoUpdate Software Key

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Filerdquo window is displayed6 Select the File to update and click the [Execute] button7 Click the [Close] button when done2168 Uploading Configuration File to PNMT PCThis function is used to upload the configuration file from the Control module of the selectedNE to the PNMT PCTo upload the configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Configuration File] button in CTRL tab2 Select the type of file to be uploaded on the Type field3 Enter the desired file name for the uploaded file And select and the directory wherethe uploaded file is to be saved4 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation5 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed6 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button7 Verify that the file was uploaded to the specified directoryROI-S06497- 43 -2169 Uploading Equipment Configuration File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file fromthe Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Equipment Config File]button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start theoperation3 Enter the desired name for the uploadedfile and select the directory where theuploaded file is to be saved4 A message window indicating the status of the operation will appear It will closeautomatically once the operation is completed5 After the upload is finished click the [Close] button6 Verify that the file was uploaded on the specified directory21610 Uploading Software Key File to PNMT PCThis feature is used to upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module of theselected NE to the PNMT PCTo upload the equipment configuration file from the Control module to the PNMT1 Click the [UD Software Key File] button in CTRL tab2 Click the [Execute] button to start the operation3 After the upload is finished click the [Close] buttonROI-S06497- 44 -21611 Configuring the Equipment Network SettingsIn order to operate the Auto Discovery and Network functions respectively with PNMS andPNMT it is necessary to first connect PNMT to each NE to configure Network informationSince NEO NODAL belongs to the NEO series it supports the AutoDiscovery functionThis function is used to configure the equipment network settings (ie IP and routingaddresses subnet masks) using the tags in the lefthand field of the Equipment NetworkSettings window of the selected NE for the PNMT PCSelect Equipment Type of System from the listIf selecting Terminal refer to Appendix AIf selecting 2-WAY refer to Appendix B

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

If selecting Tributary Only refer to Appendix CROI-S06497- 45 -217 MaintenanceThere are several maintenance control items that can be set during Maintenance ModeThe function of each control is as follows (These windows are not available whenMaintenance is Off ldquoSwitch to Maintenance mode firstrdquo is displayed)Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredMaintenance To switch Maintenance mode to ON None (displayed by default)TX SW ManualControlTo control the TX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SW ManualControlTo control the RX switch manually When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH)ATPC ManualControlAllows optional transmitting powerwhen ATPC is in operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY 1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Mute Control To set TX Mute Control When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledCW Control To turn on the Carrier Wave formeasurementsWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabled

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

IF Loopback To pinpoint faulty sections causingsignal interruptionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 46 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredDADE Adjust Select the DADE for 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH )configuration to bring INTFC statusback in phaseWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) display is always enabled (bydefault)Linearizer Control To manually disable the linearizerfunctionWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYNot displayed when Modulation Scheme isQPSKSUB Band Allows the Sub Band to be changed forODUs that permit thisWhen PNMT is locally linked (directconnection) and Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAntenna AlignmentModeTo turn on Antenna Alignment Mode(only available for specific ODU type)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1(TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYControl button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)Opposite station display enabled otherwisedisabledMain CH Loopback-1 (CH01-16)Allows the pinpointing of faulty sectionscausing signal interruptionNone (displayed by default)Main CH Loopback-2 (CHxx)(xx01-48)Same as aboveWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+11When TRANSMISSION CAPACITY10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48areNOT displayed)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT displayed)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)(CH01-48)2Same as above Only when REDUNDANCY SETTING = 2-WAYBut depending on TRANSMISSIONCAPACITY (DIR-A)(DIR-B) the followingapplies10MB CH01-05 are displayed (CH06-48 areROI-S06497- 47 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredNOT)20MB CH01-10 are displayed (CH11-48 areNOT)40MB CH01-20 are displayed (CH21-48 areNOT)80MB CH01-40 are displayed (CH41-48 areNOT)100MB CH01-48 are displayedMain Loopback-1 Allows the pinpointing of signalinterruption faultsWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Restart For optical interfaces the duration oflaser emittance during ALS manualrestarts (for testing)

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1ALS Function = EnableSTM-1 Usage = Used1 Not displayed for 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)2 For 2-WAY configuration 48CH can be set for A and B respectivelyROI-S06497- 48 -2171 Selecting MaintenanceTo open the Maintenance window1 Select Configuration 1048774 Maintenance in the NE-specific menu bar Or select MAINTfield in PNMT main window of the selected IDUMaintenance windowThis window contains the setup information for MAINT and several maintenance controlitems that need to be set during Maintenance Mode The Maintenance window is shownabove2172 ModeTo switch the NE to maintenance mode1 Click [Maintenance] button in Maintenance window2 Select on OnOff depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] to implement the command4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 49 -2173 TX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) only)To control the TX switch manually1 Click [TX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the TX system that you want to use Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected TX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2174 RX SW Manual Control (for 1+1 [HOT STANDBY ] or 1+1 [TWINPATH])To control the RX switch manually1 Click the [RX SW Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select the desired RX wireless system Thedefault setting is Auto3 Click the [Execute] button to switch to theselected RX system4 Click the [Close] button when finished2175 ATPC Manual ControlUse when an optional transmitting power is required during ATPC operationTo set the ATPC Manual1 Click [ATPC Manual Control] button inMaintenance window2 Select whether to manually turn On (or Off) ATPCManual Control and the desired decibel value3 Click the [Execute] button to activate the newsetting4 Click the [Close] button when finishedCAUTION

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

When TX SW Manual Control is changed fromthe default setting (Auto) to either No1 orNo2 this confirmation message appearsIf the TX SW Manual Control has beenmanually switched to either No1 or No2 theconfirmation message will NOT appearHowever this operation still may affect theradio linkROI-S06497- 50 -2176 TX Mute ControlTX power of the ODU is switched off when TX Mute is OnThis should be Off in normal operationTo change the TX Mute status1 Click [TX Mute Control] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select OnOff depending on the desired state3 When setting the opposite NE also select TX MuteRelease Time in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finished2177 CW ControlWhen doing frequency measurements the CW should be turned On to have an unmodulatedsignal During normal operations this status should be OffTo change the CW (MOD Carrier) status1 Click [CW Control] button in Maintenance window2 Click OnOff button depending on desired state3 Click the [Execute] button to implement the operation4 Click the [Close] button when finished2178 IF LoopbackODU or IDU faults can be pinpointed by looping back the MUX signal at the IF1 Click the [IF Loopback] button inMaintenance window2 Select On to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to activate theloopback4 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 51 -2179 DADE AdjustDADE adjustment is necessary when the IF cable is to be replaced (At initial start-up theoffset memory can be used to minimize the delay but it may interrupt traffic when the delayis substantial)To conduct DADE Adjustment1 Click [DADE Adjust] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select (click) the desired state DADE OffsetDADE or DADE off3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thecommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21710 Linearizer Control

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

The Linearizer function is used to remove the distortion from the main amplifier in theODU This feature is set to Auto by default If you need to turn it off during maintenance1 Click [Linearizer Control] button inMaintenance window2 Click Forced Reset3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thiscommand4 Click the [Close] button when finished21711 RF SettingSub Band and Shift Frequency of ODU can be selectedTo select Sub Band1 Click [RF Setting] button in Maintenancewindow2 Select the type of Sub Band in the Sub Band list3 Select the Shift Frequency in the list4 Click the [Execute] button to implement thecommand5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 52 -21712 Antenna Alignment Mode (only available for specific ODU type)The Antenna Alignment Mode is used for extending the dynamic range of the RX LEVELMONITOR (ODU) This function is only available for a specific ODU typeTo set Antenna Alignment Mode1 Click [Antenna Alignment Mode] buttonin Maintenance window2 Select OnOff3 Click the [Execute] button to activate thenew setting4 Click the [Close] button when finished21713 Main CH Loopback-1 (CH01- 16)This allows the signal sent from your selected NE tobe looped back (to that NE) via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 16)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21714 Main CH Loopback-2 (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to belooped back (to that NE) from your selected NE viathe INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2] button inMaintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 53 -

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

21715 Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B) (CH01- 48)This allows the signal sent from the opposite NE to be looped back (to that NE) from yourselected NE via the INTFCTo set the loopback1 Click the [Main CH Loopback-2 (DIR-ADIR-B)] button in Maintenance window2 Select the channel (01 - 48)3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the loopback4 Click the [Close] button when finished21716 Main Loopback-1To set the STM-1 near-end loopback1 Click the [Main Loopback-1] button inMaintenance window2 Select ON to activate the loopback3 Click the [Execute] button to apply theloopback4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 54 -21717 ALS RestartThis feature is used to set the time of manual restart of the Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)When the optical input signal is lost the IDU will emit a laser signal from STM-1 OUT at apreset value (2 sec or 90 sec) at this point if the fault has been rectified then the ALS will bereleased and operation will return to normal Otherwise the laser emission will immediatelyterminateTo set the ALS restart1 Click the [ALS Restart] button in Maintenance window2 Select the timing in seconds of the laser emission formanual restart3 Click the [Execute] button to apply the timing of themanual restart4 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 55 -218 Equipment SetupMain and Service signal ODU and CTRL settings can be monitored as well as controlled viathis window2181 Equipment Setup windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Equipment Setup in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup and control parameters for the ODU and the IDUThe Equipment Setup window is shown belowEquipment Setup window (example shows 2-WAY Configuration)ROI-S06497- 56 -2182 Editing the IDU NameTo edit the IDU name1 Click [IDU Name] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter new IDU name in the IDU Name dialog box Amaximum of 32 characters can be used3 Click the [Execute] button to change to new name4 Click the [Close] button when finished2183 Editing the Note for CTRLTo put an optional description on the current NE

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

1 Click [Note] button in Equipment Setup window2 Enter the optional description for the specific NE in theNote dialog box A maximum of 100 characters can beused in this field3 Click the [Execute] button when finished4 Click the [Close] button when finished2184 SetupSetting the ODU and IDU parameters1 Click the [Setup] button in the Equipment Setup window (or click List 1048774 Setup inthe Equipment Setup window) and another Equipment Setup window (forverifying the settings) opensEquipment Setup Window (to verify settings)INTFC = E1 DXC and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 57 -Equipment Setup Window (to verify settings)When INTFC = E1 DXC and 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)The following is an overview of the configurable itemsparametersItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredRedundancysettingTo select the desired redundancysettingNone (displayed by default)INTFC To select INTFC (the available optionsdepend on the selected User Interface)None (displayed by default)Inserted module This function is only enabled when theinterface setting and the actuallyinserted module do not match It allowsthe setting to be updated to match theinserted moduleDisplayed when INTC cannot be identifiedModulationscheme (DIRADIR-B)The type of modulation is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTransmissioncapacity (DIRADIR-B)This value denotes the transmissioncapacity (in MB) of the selectedinterface and modulation typeWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX RF Frequency The transmission frequency can be setwithin the range designated by the TX

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Start and TX Stop frequenciesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 58 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredFrequencyChannelEnables the TX and RX frequencies forthe channels to be setWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYFrame ID Identification code for the transmissionframesWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WA1(No1No2) are displayed when Redundancysetting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYTX Power Control The type of power control is set here When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAY1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2 Clicking [Configure] opens the Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)Equipment Setup Wizard window(13)ROI-S06497- 59 -3 The settings in the window can be configured To continue click [Next]Does not apply for 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) inwhich case this window does not appearEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 1+1 (TWINPATH) configurationEquipment Setup Wizard window(23)For 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 60 -

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

4 To complete the configuration procedure click [Next] and in the ensuing window click[Finish]Equipment Setup Wizard window(33)5 This will take you back to the Equipment Setup window (for verifying thesettings) Carefully confirm that the settings are correct and click [Execute] toactivate themEquipment Setup window (for verifying the settings)1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selectedthe window for configuring these settings does not appearROI-S06497- 61 -2185 Frequency Channel1 Click [Frequency Channel] button in Equipment Setup Wizard window(23)2 Click the [Browse] to locate the Channel plan file on the local hard disk3 Select Channel and click [OK] then TX and RX frequency corresponding to thechannel will be setFrequency channel file format is csv including channel name TX frequency and RXfrequencyExamplesCH-1 7442000 7603000CH-2 7603000 7442000ROI-S06497- 62 -219 ProvisioningThis window enables the interface (INTFC) SC Assignment MTPC ATPC parameters aswell as error rate and other thresholds to be setProvisioning windowTo open the Equipment Configuration Monitor1 Select Configuration 1048774 Provisioning in the NE-specific menu bar2 This window contains the setup information of the MTPC ATPC BER AlarmThreshold Cluster ALM Setting (Input) AIS Activation Main Channel Setting SC andAssignment The Provisioning window is shown belowProvisioning windowROI-S06497- 63 -The following is an overview of Provisioning itemsItemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredHighLow BERThreshold(DIR-ADIR-B)Allows the setting of the BER value that willtrigger the alarmWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYRS-232C-1 2V11-1 V11-2Assigns the respective SC to an interface When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+1

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2-WAY1V11-1 V11-2Direction SettingEnables the V11-1 V11-2 service channelclocking to be set (ie co-directional orcontra-directional)When V11-1 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4When V11-2 = SC1 SC2 SC3 SC4MTPC TX Power Allows the transmission power (dB) to beset for MTPC operationWhen TX POWER CONTROL = MTPCand Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC ThresholdLevelAllows the transmission power (dB)thresholds to be set for ATPC operationWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYAdditional ATT For setting the additional attenuationparameters (dB)When Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Range(MAX MIN)For setting the minimum and maximumATPC transmission power (dB)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC andRedundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYATPC Power Mode For setting the power mode (Holdmaintaining present status MIN minimumlevel)When TX POWER CONTROL = ATPC and

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYROI-S06497- 64 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredTX RX SW Priority Enables the respective priority to be set(pre-alarm TX RX route or No 1)When REDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1(HOT STANDBY)RX SWMaintenance ModeHas two settings manual for disabling theRX switch and forced for overriding thedisabled switchREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)RX SWCondition-EarlyWarningFor setting whether the EW (EarlyWarning) feature is to be included in theparametersREDUNDANCY SETTING = 1+1 (HOTSTANDBY)Relay Configuration The six relays in the IDU are eachassociated with a parallel alarm Four canbe configured and the other two (RL01 andRL02) have fixed alarmsNone (displayed by default)Cluster 1 - 4 Input Allows the cluster alarm input to beenabled disabledWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1EOW2 ExternalSettingEnables appropriate EOW2 calling systemsignal polarity to be set normal when theNEO IDU is connected to another NEOIDU or a PASOLINK IDU invert(ed) whenconnected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1RX Level TCNThreshold(No1No2) or(DIR-ADIR-B)For setting the threshold at which the TCNis displayedWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1(No1No2) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 1+1 (TWINPATH)(DIR-ADIR-B) are displayed whenRedundancy setting is 2-WAYSESActivation ConditionEnables setting of the lower threshold ()that activates SESNone (displayed by default)However when 1+0(E1 TRIBUTARYONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY)isselected will only be displayed if INTFC =DXC with IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage =UsedAlarm CorrelationCapabilityAllows the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms to be turned onoffNone (displayed by default)CH Usage(CH01-CH16)For setting the respective usage of the 16available channelsNone (displayed by default)CH Usage ErrorReportFor enablingdisabling the CH Usage Errorreporting functionWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = NOT USEDfor at least one of the CH1-16AIS ActivationConditionFor setting whether the AIS signal isactivated by LOF High BER or both alarmparametersWhen Redundancy setting is1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH)1+0-gt1+12-WAY1AIS GeneratedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS GeneratedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedReportFor enablingdisabling the AIS ReceivedReportWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16AIS ReceivedConditionFor setting the type of AIS ReceivedCondition parametersWhen CH USAGE (CHxx) = USED for atleast one of the CH1-16E1 Port Impedance For setting the impedance of the E1

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

interface portNone (displayed by default)XC CH Setting E1 signal channel routedirection can befreely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Control button is displayedenabled whenPNMT is locally linked (direct connection)otherwise disabledROI-S06497- 65 -Itemfeature Description Specific conditions for it tobe displayedconfiguredE-BER (MUX) Sets the E-BER threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedSD (MUX) Sets the Signal Degrade threshold for themultiplexer (MUX)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Function The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) thatintermittently turns the laser output onoffafter a designated interval from the start ofLOS mode is Enabled or Disabled)When all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = UsedALS Interval For setting the interval (from the start ofLOS) until ALS Function is to be executedWhen ALS FUNCTION = ENABLED andSTM-1 USAGE = USEDSTM-1 Usage For setting the respective usage of theSTM-1When INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage ErrorReportedFor enablingdisabling the STM-1 UsageError reporting functionWhen all the following appliesINTFC = DXCIDU ID = 1STM-1 Usage = Not Used1 When 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) or 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) is selected the window forconfiguring these settings does not appear2191 Channel SettingTo set the necessary channels (refer to Provisioning window) click CH Usage (CHxx) etcon Provisioning window to open the following window in which you can then selectactivatethe various channelsROI-S06497- 66 -2192 XC SettingThe E1 signal channel routedirection can be freely and individually set for each wirelesstributary (TRIB) or STM-1Note Can only be set when INTFC = DXC and NE ID = 1XC Setting window

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

To set the XC CH Setting1 Click the [XC CH Setting] button in Provisioning window2 Select the routing direction from the originating IDU3 Select the IDU direction and channel (CH) for connecting to4 Click the [Execute] button5 Click the [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 67 -21921 XC Setting CH MapThis window displays the cross-connect status during modification of the settingsTo display the XC Setting CH Map1 Click the [CH Map] button in the XC Setting window2 By clicking an [In] button for selecting which parameters (IDU Port or CH) to show(and which not to show) the respective IDU Port or CH is shown Clicking [Out] forthe respective IDU Port or CH will conceal it The XC display window shows theconnection statusGreen selected IDU PortGray connections other than selected IDU PortBlue CH in usedWhite unused (still available) CHPink connection data for CH freely selected by user3 By clicking [Close] you will exit the XC Setting CH Mapping window and return tothe XC Setting windowROI-S06497- 68 -2193 BER Threshold SettingThe BER thresholds throughout the system can be set in this windowFor INTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationINTFC = DXC and IDU ID = 1 and STM-1 Usage = Used and 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 69 -2194 SC AssignmentThis feature displays the assigned interface type (eg RS-232C V11 in Provisioningwindow) that is available for user channels (DSC) and sets the type of directional interfacefor SC3 and SC4For 1+1 (HOT STANDBY) or 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurationFor 2-WAY configurationROI-S06497- 70 -2195 ALS (Automatic Laser Shutdown)When the ALS is enabled the laser emission will be cut off aftera certain period has elapsed after the IDU has issued an STM-1LOS If the ALS is disabled the laser emission will continueperpetually2196 TX Power CTRLThe MTPC TX Power ATPC Threshold LevelAdditional ATT ATPC Range as well as Power modecan be set in this window2197 SW ConditionIn this window the switching (SW) parameters can be setROI-S06497- 71 -2198 Relay Configuration

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

This window shows the six relays in the IDU (that are each associated with a parallel alarm)Four can be configured and the other two (RL01 and RL02) have fixed alarms2199 Cluster Alarm InputCluster alarms can be EnableDisable in this window21910 EOW2 External SettingThe EOW2 calling system signal polarity can beset here Normal when the NEO IDU is connectedto another NEO IDU or a PASOLINK IDU Invertwhen connected to PASOLINK+ IDU or Mx IDUROI-S06497- 72 -21911 PMON SelectRX Level TCN Threshold and SES ActivationCondition percentage can be set21912 Alarm Correlation CapabilityIn this window the suppression of secondary(downstream) alarms can be turned OnOff21913 STM-1 Usage Error ReportedThe STM-1 Usage and STM-1 Usage Error Reported settings (UsedNot Used or Report[Do] Not Report) can be configured in this windowWhen STM-1 Usage is set to Not Used When STM-1 Usage is set to UsedSTM-1 Usage Error Reported can be set STM-1 Usage Error Reported cannot be setROI-S06497- 73 -220 Link Performance MonitorWhen Link Performance Monitor window is availabledisplayed for 1+1 (HOT STANDBY)1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 2-WAY configurationsFor 1+0 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) 1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) configurations it will only beavailabledisplayed if both INTFC = DXC and STM-1 USAGE = USED and IDU ID = 1The following performance items can be monitored according to G826 recommendation1048774 Out of Frame Second (OFS) ndash the total number of seconds the out of framecondition is generated in 15 minute-blocks(OFS is applied to the Total only)1048774 Severely Errored Period (SEP) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded 10E-31048774 Background Block Error (BBE) - the sum of the B1 background block error1048774 Errored Second (ES) ndash the cumulative time in which more than one B1 errorpulse per second was detected1048774 Severely Errored Second (SES) ndash the cumulative time in which the BER of aone-second period exceeded a set percentage (15 or 30)1048774 Unavailable Second (UAS) ndashthe cumulative time in which the unit remainedinoperative1048774 RX Level monitors ndashthe minimum and maximum reception level (when thereare two routes it does so for No 1 and 2 respectivelyPink color in Performance Monitor window indicates that threshold value has beenexceeded The threshold values can be set in Threshold window The detailed dailyperformance data for the last seven days can be viewed by clicking the [Detail] button2201 Viewing Link Performance MonitorTo view Link Performance MonitorClick Performance Monitor 1048774 Link Performance Monitor in the NE-specific menu bar ofthe target NE that you intend to monitor (or alternatively PNMT main window1048774 LPM field)Link Performance Monitor windowThe following are the RequirementsSettings for displaying the respective tabsTab Configuration for Link Performance Monitor Window

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Redundancy Setting When INTFC = DXC STM-1 USAGE = USED For all other settingsIDU-1 IDU-2 IDU-3 IDU-4 IDU-1IDU-2IDU-3IDU-41+1 (HOT STANDBY) Total Total Total Total Total1+1 (TWINPATH) Total Total Total Total Total1+0-gt1+1 Total Total Total Total Total2-WAYDIR-ADIR-BMUXDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-BDIR-ADIR-B1+0(E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -1+1 (E1 TRIBUTARY ONLY) MUX - - - -ROI-S06497- 74 -Displaying the Total tabDXC - 1+1(HOT STANDBY) - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 1 +1 (HOT STANDBY) 1+1 (TWINPATH) or 1+0-gt1+1 configurations the Total tab isdisplayed by defaultDisplaying the DIR-ADIR-B TabsDXC - 2-WAY - STM-1 Usage=Not UsedFor 2-WAY configurations the DIR-ADIR-B tabs are displayed by defaultROI-S06497- 75 -Displaying the MUX tabDXC - 2-WAY - IDU ID=1 - STM-1 Usage=UsedThe MUX tab will be displayed for the settings INTFC = DXC and IDU ID=1 and STM-1USAGE = USED2202 Threshold SettingTo set the threshold values1 Click [Threshold] button in Link Performance Monitor Threshold windowLink Performance Monitor Threshold window2 Select the performance item that is to be configured in the table shown above TheG826 measure becomes available for setting when selected3 Set the monitoring values (the alarm Occur and Recover) in the appropriate fieldThe alarm status will be monitored when it reaches the alarm occur value and issuean alarm clear status when the recover value set in the threshold table is reached4 Click [Execute] button to activate the new settings5 Click [Close] button when finishedROI-S06497- 76 -2203 Link Performance Monitor (1day 15 min Data) windowTo view the 1day Data1 Click [Detail] button in Link Performance Monitor windowLink Performance Monitor (1 day Data) windowTo view the 15-min Data1 Click button of the target date in Link Performance Monitor (1 day Data) window todisplay the detailed 15-minute performance dataLink Performance Monitor (15-min Data) window2 The data can be saved in text format by clicking on the save icon (or click File1048774Save

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

As) Or it can be refreshed by clicking on the reload (refresh) icon (or clickFile1048774Reload) By clicking the RatioCount icon (or by the procedureView1048774RatioCount) you can switch from ldquordquo to ldquocountrdquo (or vice versa)WARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCROI-S06497- 77 -221 Event LogThe Event Log window displays the datetime when the event data was received item andstatus2211 Event Log monitor1 Click [NE Stored Log] in the NE-specific menu bar of the target NE that you intend tomonitor2 A message window showing the progress of the uploading of the Event Log data willappear on the screen Wait until the PNMT finishes the uploading of the data Theprogress window will automatically close once the uploading is completed3 NE Stored Log window will be displayed The event log is presented in a table formshowing the date of the event the item that triggered the event and the statuschange4 Sorting is possible for every column in NE Stored Log window5 The date shown in NE Stored Log window will be in the format of the OS6 The data can be refreshed by clicking on the upload (refresh) iconWARNINGWhile data is being updated do not remove the USBcable connecting the IDU with the PCNE Stored Log windowROI-S06497- 78 -222 Inventory TabThe relevant inventory information for the equipment can be viewed using this function2221 Inventory MonitorTo display the equipment version1 Select the Inventory field in PNMT main window of the selected IDU2 Inventory tab shows the Code No Date of Manufacture Serial No Hardware Typeand Software Version of the equipment3 The Alarm List Window can be displayed by clicking the Alarm List icon (or by theprocedure List1048774Alarm List) The Alarm List window will show any Alarmsoccurring in the selected IDUAlarm List windowROI-S06497- 79 -Appendix A Equipment Network Settings (Terminal)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NE TypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2Subnet Mask

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

IP AddressPNMS(EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tabletopbottom3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskBranch NE

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

intermediate 2 BranchesRouting Default GatewayROI-S06497- 80 -Static Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressRadioEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 81 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 82 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 Braches

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 83 -CTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or Radio or EM1RadioEM2 or RadioEM2EM1 or EM2 or EM2EM13 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 84 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 85 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 86 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 87 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 88 -Appendix B Equipment Network Settings (2-WAY)

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NETypeCategory Input ItemCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ADIR-BEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressPNMS (EM1)Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRoot NE top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneral Branch NE TypeEquipment TypeDIR-ADIR- IP AddressBEM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top NotselectableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressBranch NE topbottom4 BranchesDIR-BSubnet MaskROI-S06497- 89 -IP AddressEM2Subnet MaskIP AddressEM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BEM1EM2Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Table2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeIP AddressDIR-ASubnet MaskIP AddressDIR-BSubnet MaskIP AddressEM2EM1Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing Tableintermediate3 BranchesNODAL IP AddressCTRL TypeGeneralBranch NE TypeDIR-ADIR-B IP Address

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

EM2EM1 Subnet MaskDefault GatewayRoutingStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNotselectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 90 -1 In Category 1048774 General select the CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NEThe nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Branch NE (3 Branches)Subnet diverges in three waysbull Branch NE (4 Branches)Subnet diverges in four waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) are Normal NE 1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and BranchNE Type)CategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 91 -CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE (Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 3 BranchesPortCategoryROI-S06497- 92 -CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 4 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NE2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will change

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

according to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedROI-S06497- 93 -bull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or DIR-A or DIR-B or EM1DIR-ADIR-BEM2 or DIR-ADIR-BEM2EM1or DIR-BEM1EM2 or EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentries3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing TableROI-S06497- 94 -3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 95 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 96 -This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 97 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetsROI-S06497- 98 -Appendix C Equipment Network Settings (TRIBUTARY ONLY)In Equipment Network Setting the set item of each NE is different The set items of each NEdepend on selecting CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NE Type)CTRL Type (General)CTRL Type IDU Branch NEType

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Category Input ItemGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskPNMS(EM1) IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRoot NE top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableRootNE(Bridge) top Not selectableNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2 IP AddressSubnet MaskEM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableBranch NE topbottom 2 BranchesNODAL IP AddressGeneral CTRL TypeBranch NE TypeEM2EM1 IP AddressSubnet MaskRouting Default GatewayStatic Routing TableNormal NEtopintermediatebottomNot selectableNODAL IP AddressNote1 Here EM1 EM2 indicate IDUs front interface NMS NE ports respectivelyNote2 The NODAL Group comprises a maximum of four (4) IDUs Each IDUs functionsdiffer according to its position within the group top intermediate or bottom (end)as belowtop IDU1intermediate IDU 2 in a three IDU configurationIDUs 2 3 in a four IDU configurationbottom IDU 2 in a two IDU configurationIDU 3 in a three IDU configurationIDU 4 in a four IDU configurationROI-S06497- 99 -1 In Category 1048774 General and select there CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)The NE will appear as follows (according to configuration)bull Root NE

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Root NE (Bridge)The nearest NE to PNMS configure as Root NEbull Branch NE (2 Branches)Subnet diverges in two waysbull Normal NEThe rest of all NE (except above mentioned) is Normal NECategoryPortCategoryROI-S06497- 100 -1-1 Port Category item changes according to CTRL Type (CTRL Type and Branch NEType)CTRL Type = Root NECTRL Type = Root NE(Bridge)CTRL Type = Branch NE or Branch NE Type = 2 BranchesCTRL Type = Normal NEPortCategoryROI-S06497- 101 -2 Set and select Port category and Routing The right hand screen will changeaccording to the selected item in Categorybull Primary IP AddressPNMS identify a NE with using the IP address in NE The check can be applied onlyto 1port category of several Port categories that exists in CTRL Type whenBranch NE is selectedbull IP Address amp Subnet MaskThe following items are set to each PortPNMS(E1) or EM1EM2EM1 or EM23 Select and set Routing3-1 If there is not subnet in the network Static Routing table will not show anyentriesROI-S06497- 102 -3-2 In case of several subnet in the Network click [Add] to entry the required value inStatic Routing Table3-3 Click [OK] button to activate the address setting3-4 [Modify] is clicked to correct the registered value in Static Routing table3-5 [Remove] is clicked to delete the registered value in Static Routing tableROI-S06497- 103 -4 Select and set NODALIn this window you can set the IP addresses for all IDUs you wish to include in thesame StationWhen an IDU Tab is selected in the Station the IP address of the corresponding IDUis disabledThis example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are four IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are three IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 104 -

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are two IDUs in the Station)This example shows IDU-1 Tab selected (when there are one IDUs in the Station)ROI-S06497- 105 -5 Click [Execute] button to activate the Equipment Networking setting6 Click [Close] button when finishedNOTEWhen executing Equipment Network Settingcommunication will be lost when the Control module reinitialisesto the new system configuration This WILLNOT affect the wireless link During this time PNMTconnection to the NE will be lost but will automatically berestored after the Control module resetslt Sample Network Configuration gt1 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No02is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo021No024No023No022PNMS192168012552552550

Router19216801025525525501721801255255255192No01No03No05No07No09No04No06No08No101721802255255255192172180325525525519217218042552552551921721805255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Root NEPNMT

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Normal NE Normal NE Normal NE172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192ROI-S06497- 106 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No10 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 107 -2 The Network Configuration when subnet is connectedNE No01 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo011No014No013No012172180225525525519217218032552552551921721804

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

2552552551921721805255255255192172180625525525519217218082552552551921721801025525525519217218012255255255192172180725525525519217218092552552551921721801125525525519217218013255255255192

Normal NE Normal NERoot NE(Bridge)PNMSRouter1721801255255255192

PNMTNo02No04No06No08No03No05No07No09ROI-S06497- 108 -General (Category)NECTRL Type Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataDIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721802BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Root NE(Bridge)Notselectable 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721803BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3Routing

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Static Routing Table -DIR-ADIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No01Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218012 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218013 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

ROI-S06497- 109 -3 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 2 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02PNMTNormal NE172180325525525519217218012552552551921721802192168010 255255255192255255255019216801255255255017218065255255255192

Branch NETRIBUTARY ONLY17218042552552551921721805255255255192172180662552552551921721808255255255192172180102552552551921721807255255255192172180925525525519217218011255255255192No04No06No08No05No07No09Normal NE 1721806 Normal NE255255255192ROI-S06497- 110 -General (Category)NE CTRLType

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Branch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataRadioEM2 IP Address 1721801Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192DIR- IP Address 1721803BEM1EM2 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 2 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721804BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A DIR- IP Address 1721805BEM2EM1 Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721807 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No05 Normal NE NotselectableRouting

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

Static Routing Table -IP Address 1721808 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No06 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721809 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No07 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218010 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No08 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218011 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No09 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 111 -4 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 3 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALBranch NENo031No034No033No032Root NEPNMSRouterNo01 No02Normal NE1721801292552552551921721801255255255192 172180225525525519219216801025525525501921680125525525501721806517218066 255255255192255255255192172180130

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

255255255192No04 No05Normal NE Normal NEPNMTTRIBUTARY ONLY1721803255255255192172180425525525519217218052552552551921721806255255255192ROI-S06497- 112 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -DIR-A IP Address 17218065Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180129 DIR-BSubnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Branch NE 3 Branches 1RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721804 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Notselectable 2RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721805 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801Normal NE Not

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

selectable 3RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 1721806 EM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03Normal NE Notselectable 4RoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 113 -5 The Network configuration in case of several subnets(Branch NE Type = 4 Branches)NE No03 is NEO NODALAll other NEs are either PASOLINK NEO PASOLINK NEO CPV or PASOLINK NEONODALNormal NE Normal NENormal NE Branch NEPNMSRouter192168012552552550

Root NE1921680102552552550No011721801255255255192

Normal NEPNMT1721803255255255192172180193255255255192No04 No05No02 No06No0317218066255255255192172180130255255255192172180194255255255192172180225525525519217218065255255255192172180129

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

255255255192ROI-S06497- 114 -General (Category)NE CTRLTypeBranch NETypeCategory Item Name Input dataIP Address 1721801 RadioEM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 192168010 PNMS(EM1)Subnet Mask 2552552550Default Gateway 19216801IP Address 17218064Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180128Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721803IP Address 172180192Subnet Mask 255255255192No01 Root NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing TableDefault Gateway 1721803IP Address 1721802 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No02 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218065DIR-A Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address DIR-B 172180129Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 172180193 EM2Subnet Mask 255255255192IP Address 1721803 EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 1721801No03 Branch NE 4 BranchesRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 17218066 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 17218065No04 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180130 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180129No05 Normal NE NotselectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -IP Address 172180194 RadioEM2EM1Subnet Mask 255255255192Default Gateway 172180193No06 Normal NE Not

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork

selectableRoutingStatic Routing Table -ROI-S06497- 115 -Appendix D How to Avoid Losing Setting Values during DownloadingAfter setting the correct OfflineTool TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency trydownloading the rdquopn_equip_0xrdquo(x1-4) file to the PNMT againltCalculating the frequency setting valuesgtObtain the UpperLower and Shift Frequency data via the LCT MENU-Equipment Setupwindow On the basis of the displayed TX RF Frequency range (TX Start Frequency - TXStop Frequency) use equations (a)(b) below to calculate the RX RF Frequency (Where TXRF RX RF and Shift frequencies can be individually set this does not apply)(a) When LowerUpper setting is UpperRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency ndash Shift Frequency value(b) When LowerUpper setting is LowerRX RF Frequency = TX RF Frequency + Shift Frequency valueIf downloading is disrupted at IDU ID1 the above PNMT verification window appearsUse the thus obtained TX RF Frequency and RX RF Frequency as the OfflineToolEquipment Setup TX RF and RX RF frequencies and try downloading again Usually this willwork